blob: d8f8851c72d9ad0f1820467de998e9d24797ac03 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000026#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000027#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000028#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
38#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000039#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000041#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000043#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000044#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
45#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000048#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000049#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000050#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000051#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000052using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000053using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000054
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000055#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
56
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000057// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
58// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
59// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
60// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000061static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
62 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
63 cl::desc(
64 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
65
66static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
67 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
68 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000069
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000070static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000071 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
72 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000073
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000074static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
75 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
76 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000077
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000078static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
79 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
80 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
81 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
82 "predicated store"));
83
84static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
85 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
86 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
87 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
88
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +000089static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
90 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
91 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
92 "executed"));
93
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +000094static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
95 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
96 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
97 "speculatively executed instructions"));
98
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000099STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000100STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
101 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
102STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
103 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
104STATISTIC(
105 NumLookupTablesHoles,
106 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000107STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000108STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
109 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000110STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000111
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000112namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000113// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
114// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
115// cases composing the case group.
116typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000117 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000118// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
119// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
120// switch for that PHI.
121typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000122
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000123/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
124struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
125 ConstantInt *Value;
126 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000127
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000128 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000129 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
130
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000131 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
132 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
133 return Value < RHS.Value;
134 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000135
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000136 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
137};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000138
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000139class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000140 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000141 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000142 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +0000143 AssumptionCache *AC;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000144 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000145 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000146 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
147 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000148 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000149 BasicBlock *Pred,
150 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000151 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
152 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000153
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000154 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000155 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000156 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
157 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000158 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000159 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000160 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000161 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000162 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
163 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000164
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000165public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000166 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000167 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
168 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
169 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), AC(AC),
170 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
172};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000173}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000174
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000175/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000176/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000177static bool
178SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
179 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000180 if (SI1 == SI2)
181 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000182
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000183 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
184 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
185 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
186 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
187 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000188
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000189 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
190 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000191 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
192 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
193 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000194 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
195 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000196 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
197 if (FailBlocks)
198 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
199 Fail = true;
200 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000201 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000202
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000203 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000204}
205
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000206/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
207/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
208/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000209static bool
210isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
211 Instruction *Cond,
212 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
213 if (SI1 == SI2)
214 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000215 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
216
217 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000218 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000219 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
220 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
221 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
222 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000223 if (!Ci2)
224 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000225 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
226 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
227 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
228 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
229 return false;
230
231 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
232 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000233 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000234 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
235 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
236 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000237 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
238 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000239 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000240 return false;
241 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
242 }
243 return true;
244}
245
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000246/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
247/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
248/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
249/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000250static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
251 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000252 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
253 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000254
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000255 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000256 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000257 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000258}
259
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000260/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
261/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
262/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000263/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000264static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000265 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000266 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000267 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000268 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000269}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000270
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000271/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
272/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000273/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
274/// which works well enough for us.
275///
276/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000277/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
278/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
279/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
280/// set and true is returned.
281///
282/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
283/// Select whose cost is 2.
284///
285/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
286/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
287/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000288static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000289 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000290 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000291 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
292 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000293 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
294 // so limit the recursion depth.
295 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
296 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
297 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
298 return false;
299
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000300 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000301 if (!I) {
302 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
303 // can be executed unconditionally.
304 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
305 if (C->canTrap())
306 return false;
307 return true;
308 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000309 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000310
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000311 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000312 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000313 if (PBB == BB)
314 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000315
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000316 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
317 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000318 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
319 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000320 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000321 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000322
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000323 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
324 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000325 if (!AggressiveInsts)
326 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000327
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000328 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000329 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
330 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000331
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000332 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
333 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
334 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000335 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000336 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000337
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000338 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000339
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000340 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
341 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
342 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
343 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
344 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
345 // enabled further IR optimizations.
346 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
347 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000348 return false;
349
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000350 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
351 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000352
353 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
354 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000355 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000356 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
357 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000358 return false;
359 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
360 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000361 return true;
362}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000363
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000364/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000365/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000366static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000367 // Normal constant int.
368 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000369 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000370 return CI;
371
372 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
373 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000374 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000375
376 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
377 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
378 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
379
380 // IntToPtr const int.
381 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
382 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
383 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
384 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
385 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
386 return CI;
387 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000388 return cast<ConstantInt>(
389 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000390 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000391 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000392}
393
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000394namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000395
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000396/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
397/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
398/// structure.
399/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
400/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
401/// representing the different cases for the switch.
402/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
403/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
404/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
405/// fail.
406struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000407 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000408 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
409 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
410 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
411 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000412
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000413 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000414 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
415 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
416 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000417 }
418
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000419 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000420 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000421 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000422 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000423
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000425 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
426 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
427 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000428 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
429 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000430 CompValue = NewVal;
431 return (CompValue != nullptr);
432 }
433
434 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
435 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
436 /// match depending on isEQ).
437 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
438 /// against is placed in CompValue.
439 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
440 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000441 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000442 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
443 ICmpInst *ICI;
444 ConstantInt *C;
445 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000446 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000447 return false;
448 }
449
450 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000451 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000452
453 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000454 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000455 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000456 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000457
458 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
459 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
460
461 /*
462 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
463 x : BITVECTOR(64);
464 y : BITVECTOR(64);
465 z : BITVECTOR(64);
466 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
467 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
468 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
469 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000470 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
471 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
472 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000473 */
474
475 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
476 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
477 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
478 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
479 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
480 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
481 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
482
483 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
484 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
485 //
486 // mask = (1 << z)
487 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
488 //
489 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
490 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
491
492 // Pattern match a special case:
493 /*
494 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
495 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
496 );
497 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000498 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000499 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
500 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000501 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000502 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000503 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000504 return false;
505
506 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000507 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000508 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
509 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000510 UsedICmps++;
511 return true;
512 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000513 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000514
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000515 // Pattern match a special case:
516 /*
517 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
518 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
519 );
520 */
521 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
522 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
523 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
524 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
525 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
526 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
527 return false;
528
529 Vals.push_back(C);
530 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
531 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
532 UsedICmps++;
533 return true;
534 }
535 }
536
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000537 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000538 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000539 return false;
540
541 UsedICmps++;
542 Vals.push_back(C);
543 return ICI->getOperand(0);
544 }
545
546 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000547 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
548 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000549
550 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
551 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
552 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000553 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
554 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000555 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
556 }
557
558 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
559 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
560 // x != 0 && x != 1.
561 if (!isEQ)
562 Span = Span.inverse();
563
564 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
565 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
566 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000567 }
568
569 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000570 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000571 return false;
572
573 // Add all values from the range to the set
574 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
575 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000576
577 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000578 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000579 }
580
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000581 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000582 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
583 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
584 /// vector.
585 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000586 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000587 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
588 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000589
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000590 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
591 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000592 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000593
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000594 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000595 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000596 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000597
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000598 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000599 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000600
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000601 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
602 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
603 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000604 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
605 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
606 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
607 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000608 continue;
609 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000610
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000611 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000612 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000613 // Match succeed, continue the loop
614 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000615 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000616
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000617 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
618 // comparison against the same value as the others.
619 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
620 if (!Extra) {
621 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000622 continue;
623 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000624 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
625 CompValue = nullptr;
626 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000627 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000628 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +0000630}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000631
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000632static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000633 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000634 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
635 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
636 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
637 if (BI->isConditional())
638 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000639 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
640 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000641 }
642
643 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000644 if (Cond)
645 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000646}
647
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000648/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000649/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000650Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000651 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000652 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
653 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
654 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000655 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
656 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
657 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000658 CV = SI->getCondition();
659 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000660 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000661 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000662 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000663 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000664 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000665
666 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000667 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000668 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
669 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000670 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000671 CV = Ptr;
672 }
673 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000674 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000675}
676
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000677/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000678/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000679BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
680 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000681 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000682 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000683 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
684 ++i)
685 Cases.push_back(
686 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000687 return SI->getDefaultDest();
688 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000689
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000690 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000691 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000692 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000693 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
694 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000695 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000696}
697
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000698/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000699/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000700static void
701EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
702 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000703 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000704}
705
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000706/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000707static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
708 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000709 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
710
711 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
712 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
713 std::swap(V1, V2);
714
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000715 if (V1->size() == 0)
716 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000717 if (V1->size() == 1) {
718 // Just scan V2.
719 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
720 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
721 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
722 return true;
723 }
724
725 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
726 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
727 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
728 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
729 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
730 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
731 return true;
732 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
733 ++i1;
734 else
735 ++i2;
736 }
737 return false;
738}
739
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000740/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
741/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
742/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
743/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
744/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000745bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
746 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000747 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000748 if (!PredVal)
749 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000750
751 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
752 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000753 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
754 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000755
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000756 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
757 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
758
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000759 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000760 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000761 BasicBlock *PredDef =
762 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
763 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000764
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000765 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000766 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000767 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000768 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000769
770 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
771 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
772 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
773 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
774 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
775 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000776 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000777 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000778
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000779 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
780 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
781 // uncond br.
782 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
783 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000784 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000785 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000786
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000787 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000788 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000789
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000790 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000791 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
792 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000793
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000794 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
795 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000796 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000797
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000798 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
799 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000800 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000801 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
802 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000803
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000804 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000805 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000806
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000807 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
808 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000809 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000810 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
811 if (HasWeight)
812 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
813 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000814 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000815 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
816 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000817 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
818 --i;
819 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000820 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000821 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000822 Weights.pop_back();
823 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000824 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
825 SI->removeCase(i);
826 }
827 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000828 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000829 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000830 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
831 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000832
833 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000834 return true;
835 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000836
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000837 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
838 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000839 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000840 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000841 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
842 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000843 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000844 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000845 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
846 }
847 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000848
849 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
850 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000851 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000852 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
853 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
854 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
855 break;
856 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000857
858 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000859 if (!TheRealDest)
860 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000861
862 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
863 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000864 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
865 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
866 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000867 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000868 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000869
870 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000871 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000872 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000873
874 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000875 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
876 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000877
878 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
879 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000880}
881
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000882namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000883/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
884/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
885/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
886struct ConstantIntOrdering {
887 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
888 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
889 }
890};
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000891}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000892
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000893static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
894 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
895 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
896 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000897 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000898 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000899 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000900}
901
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000902static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000903 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000904 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000905 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000906 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
907
908 return false;
909}
910
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000911/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
912/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
913/// metadata.
914static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
915 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000916 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000917 assert(MD);
918 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000919 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000920 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000921 }
922
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000923 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
924 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
925 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000926 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000927 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
928 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
929 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
930 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000931 }
932}
933
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000934/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000935static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000936 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
937 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
938 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
939 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
940 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000941 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000942}
943
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000944/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
945/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000946/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
947/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000948bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
949 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000950 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000951 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000952 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
953 bool Changed = false;
954
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000955 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000956 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000957 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000958
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000959 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
960 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000961 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000962
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000963 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
964 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
965 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
966 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
967 std::vector<BasicBlock*> Blocks = { TI->getParent() };
968 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, Blocks, ".fold.split"))
969 return false;
970 }
971 }
972
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000973 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000974 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000975 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
976
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000977 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000978 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
979
980 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
981 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
982 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000983 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000984
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000985 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
986 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000987 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
988 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
989
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000990 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000991 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000992 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000993 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
994 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
995 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000996 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
997 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
998 // successor's weights
999 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001000
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001001 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001002 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001003 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001004 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001005 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1006 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1007 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001008 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001009
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001010 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1011 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1012 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001013 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001014 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1015 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1016 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1017 else {
1018 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1019 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001020
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001021 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1022 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001023 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1024 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001025 Weights.pop_back();
1026 }
1027
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001028 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001029 --i;
1030 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001031 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001032
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001033 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001034 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1035 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1036 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1037 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1038 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001039
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001040 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1041 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001042 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1043 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1044 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1045 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1046 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001047 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1048 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1049 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1050 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001051 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1052 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001053 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001054 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001055
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001056 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1057 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1058 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1059 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1060 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1061 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1062 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1063 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001064 } else {
1065 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1066 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1067 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001068 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1069 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001070 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1071 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1072 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001073
1074 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001075 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1076 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001077 Weights.pop_back();
1078 }
1079
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001080 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1081 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001082 --i;
1083 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001084 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001085
1086 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1087 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001088 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1089 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1090 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001091 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1092 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001093 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1094 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001095 PTIHandled.erase(
1096 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001097 }
1098
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001099 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1100 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001101 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001102 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001103 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1104 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001105 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001106 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001107 }
1108
1109 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1110 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1111 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001112 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1113 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001114
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001115 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001116 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001117 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001118 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001119 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001120 }
1121
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001122 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001123 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1124 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001125 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001126 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1127 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001128
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001129 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1130 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1131 FitWeights(Weights);
1132
1133 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1134
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001135 NewSI->setMetadata(
1136 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1137 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001138 }
1139
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001140 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001141
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001142 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1143 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1144 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001145 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001146 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1147 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001148 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001149 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001150 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001151 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1152 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001153 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001154 }
1155 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1156 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001157
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001158 Changed = true;
1159 }
1160 }
1161 return Changed;
1162}
1163
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001164// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1165// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1166// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001167static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1168 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001169 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001170 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001171 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001172 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1173 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1174 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001175 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001176 return false;
1177 }
1178 }
1179 }
1180 return true;
1181}
1182
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001183static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1184
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001185/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1186/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1187/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001188static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001189 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001190 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1191 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1192 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1193 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1194 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001195 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1196 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001197
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001198 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1199 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1200
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001201 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001202 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1203 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1204 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1205 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1206 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001207 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001208 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001209 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001210 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001211 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001212 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001213 return false;
1214
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001215 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001216
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001217 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001218 do {
1219 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1220 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1221 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1222 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001223
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001224 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1225 return Changed;
1226
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001227 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1228 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1229 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001230 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001231 if (!I2->use_empty())
1232 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001233 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001234 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1235 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1236 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1237 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1238 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1239 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1240 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1241 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1242 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1243 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001244 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001245 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001246 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001247
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001248 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1249 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001250 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1251 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1252 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1253 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1254 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001255 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001256 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001257 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001258 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001259 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001260
1261 return true;
1262
1263HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001264 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1265 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001266 return Changed;
1267
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001268 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001269 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001270 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001271 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1272 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1273 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1274 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1275 continue;
1276
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001277 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1278 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1279 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1280 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001281 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001282
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001283 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001284 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001285 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001286 return Changed;
1287 }
1288 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001289
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001290 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001291 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001292 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001293 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001294 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1295 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001296 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001297 }
1298
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001299 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001300 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1301 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1302 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1303 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001304 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001305 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001306 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001307 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001308 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001309 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1310 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001311 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1312 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001313
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001314 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1315 // that determines the right value.
1316 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001317 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001318 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1319 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1320 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001321
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001322 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1323 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1324 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1325 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001326 }
1327 }
1328
1329 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001330 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1331 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001332
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001333 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001334 return true;
1335}
1336
James Molloycacfc162016-08-31 13:16:52 +00001337// Return true if V0 and V1 are equivalent. This handles the obvious cases
1338// where V0 == V1 and V0 and V1 are both identical instructions, but also
1339// handles loads and stores with identical operands.
1340//
1341// Because determining if two memory instructions are equivalent
1342// depends on control flow, the \c At0 and \c At1 parameters specify a
1343// location for the query. This function is essentially answering the
1344// query "If V0 were moved to At0, and V1 were moved to At1, are V0 and V1
1345// equivalent?". In practice this means checking that moving V0 to At0
1346// doesn't cross any other memory instructions.
1347static bool areValuesTriviallySame(Value *V0, BasicBlock::const_iterator At0,
1348 Value *V1, BasicBlock::const_iterator At1) {
1349 if (V0 == V1)
1350 return true;
1351
1352 // Also check for instructions that are identical but not pointer-identical.
1353 // This can include load instructions that haven't been CSE'd.
1354 if (!isa<Instruction>(V0) || !isa<Instruction>(V1))
1355 return false;
1356 const auto *I0 = cast<Instruction>(V0);
1357 const auto *I1 = cast<Instruction>(V1);
1358 if (!I0->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I1))
1359 return false;
1360
1361 if (!I0->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
1362 return true;
1363
1364 // Instructions that may read or write memory have extra restrictions. We
1365 // must ensure we don't treat %a and %b as equivalent in code such as:
1366 //
1367 // %a = load %x
1368 // store %x, 1
1369 // if (%c) {
1370 // %b = load %x
1371 // %d = add %b, 1
1372 // } else {
1373 // %d = add %a, 1
1374 // }
1375
1376 // Be conservative. We don't want to search the entire CFG between def
1377 // and use; if the def isn't in the same block as the use just bail.
1378 if (I0->getParent() != At0->getParent() ||
1379 I1->getParent() != At1->getParent())
1380 return false;
1381
1382 // Again, be super conservative. Ideally we'd be able to query AliasAnalysis
1383 // but we currently don't have that available.
1384 auto WritesMemory = [](const Instruction &I) {
1385 return I.mayReadOrWriteMemory();
1386 };
1387 if (std::any_of(std::next(I0->getIterator()), At0, WritesMemory))
1388 return false;
1389 if (std::any_of(std::next(I1->getIterator()), At1, WritesMemory))
1390 return false;
1391 return true;
1392}
1393
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001394// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1395// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1396static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1397 unsigned OpIdx) {
1398 // Early exit.
1399 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1400 return true;
1401
1402 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1403 default:
1404 return true;
1405 case Instruction::Call:
1406 case Instruction::Invoke:
1407 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1408 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1409 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
1410 return !isa<IntrinsicInst>(I);
1411 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1412 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1413 return OpIdx != 2;
1414 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1415 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1416 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1417 return OpIdx == 0;
1418 case Instruction::Alloca:
1419 return false;
1420 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1421 if (OpIdx == 0)
1422 return true;
1423 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
1424 return !It->isStructTy();
1425 }
1426}
1427
James Molloycacfc162016-08-31 13:16:52 +00001428// All blocks in Blocks unconditionally jump to a common successor. Analyze
1429// the last non-terminator instruction in each block and return true if it would
1430// be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1431// instruction instead. Set NumPHIsRequired to the number of PHI nodes that
1432// would need to be created during sinking.
1433static bool canSinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks,
1434 unsigned &NumPHIsRequired) {
1435 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1436 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1437 if (BB->getTerminator() == &BB->front())
1438 // Block was empty.
1439 return false;
1440 Insts.push_back(BB->getTerminator()->getPrevNode());
1441 }
1442
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001443 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1444 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1445 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1446 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1447 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1448 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1449 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1450 return false;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001451 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1452 // have no uses.
1453 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1454 return false;
1455 }
1456
1457 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1458 for (auto *I : Insts)
1459 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1460 return false;
1461
James Molloycacfc162016-08-31 13:16:52 +00001462 // If this isn't a store, check the only user is a single PHI.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001463 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1464 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloycacfc162016-08-31 13:16:52 +00001465 if (!PNUse ||
1466 !all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) {
1467 return *I->user_begin() == PNUse;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001468 }))
1469 return false;
1470 }
1471
James Molloycacfc162016-08-31 13:16:52 +00001472 NumPHIsRequired = 0;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001473 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1474 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1475 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1476 return false;
1477 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloycacfc162016-08-31 13:16:52 +00001478 return areValuesTriviallySame(I->getOperand(OI), I->getIterator(),
1479 I0->getOperand(OI), I0->getIterator());
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001480 };
1481 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1482 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1483 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1484 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001485 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1486 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001487 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1488 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001489 }
James Molloycacfc162016-08-31 13:16:52 +00001490 ++NumPHIsRequired;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001491 }
1492 }
1493 return true;
1494}
1495
1496// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1497// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1498// into one instruction.
James Molloy8a66a392016-08-31 13:16:30 +00001499static void sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloycacfc162016-08-31 13:16:52 +00001500 unsigned Dummy;
1501 (void)Dummy;
1502 assert(canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks, Dummy) &&
1503 "Must analyze before transforming!");
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001504 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1505
1506 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1507 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1508 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1509 for (auto *BB : Blocks)
1510 Insts.push_back(BB->getTerminator()->getPrevNode());
1511
James Molloy8a66a392016-08-31 13:16:30 +00001512 // We don't need to do any checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should have
1513 // done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001514 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1515 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1516 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1517 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1518 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1519 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1520 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1521 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1522 // small mess we may make.
1523 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1524 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1525 });
1526 if (!NeedPHI) {
1527 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1528 continue;
1529 }
1530
1531 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1532 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1533 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1534 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1535 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1536 for (auto *I : Insts)
1537 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1538 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1539 }
1540
1541 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1542 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1543 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1544 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1545 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1546
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001547 // Update metadata.
1548 for (auto *I : Insts)
1549 if (I != I0)
1550 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
1551
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001552 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1553 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1554 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1555 // instruction and nuke it.
1556 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1557 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1558 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1559 PN->eraseFromParent();
1560 }
1561
1562 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1563 for (auto *I : Insts)
1564 if (I != I0)
1565 I->eraseFromParent();
1566}
1567
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001568/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001569/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1570/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1571/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1572static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1573 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001574 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1575
James Molloy76c9d422016-08-31 13:16:45 +00001576 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> Blocks;
1577 for (auto *BB : predecessors(BBEnd))
1578 Blocks.push_back(BB);
1579 if (Blocks.size() != 2 ||
1580 !all_of(Blocks, [](const BasicBlock *BB) {
1581 auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
1582 return BI && BI->isUnconditional();
1583 }))
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001584 return false;
James Molloy76c9d422016-08-31 13:16:45 +00001585
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001586 bool Changed = false;
James Molloycacfc162016-08-31 13:16:52 +00001587 unsigned NumPHIsToInsert;
1588 while (canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks, NumPHIsToInsert) && NumPHIsToInsert <= 1) {
James Molloy76c9d422016-08-31 13:16:45 +00001589 sinkLastInstruction(Blocks);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001590 NumSinkCommons++;
1591 Changed = true;
1592 }
1593 return Changed;
1594}
1595
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001596/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1597/// conditional block.
1598///
1599/// We are looking for code like the following:
1600/// BrBB:
1601/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1602/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1603/// ... // function).
1604/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1605/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1606/// ThenBB:
1607/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1608/// br label EndBB
1609/// EndBB:
1610/// ...
1611/// We are going to transform this into:
1612/// BrBB:
1613/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1614/// ... //
1615/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1616/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1617/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1618/// ...
1619///
1620/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1621/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001622static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1623 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001624 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1625 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001626 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001627
1628 // Volatile or atomic.
1629 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001630 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001631
1632 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1633
1634 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001635 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001636 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1637 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1638 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001639 // Skip debug info.
1640 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1641 continue;
1642 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001643
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001644 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001645 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001646 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001647
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001648 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1649 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1650 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1651 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1652 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001653 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001654 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001655 }
1656
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001657 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001658}
1659
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001660/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001661///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001662/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1663/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1664/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1665/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1666/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1667///
1668/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1669/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1670/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1671/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1672///
1673///
1674/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1675/// \code
1676/// BB:
1677/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1678/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1679/// ThenBB:
1680/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001681/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001682/// EndBB:
1683/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1684/// ...
1685/// \endcode
1686///
1687/// Into this IR:
1688/// \code
1689/// BB:
1690/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1691/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1692/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1693/// ...
1694/// \endcode
1695///
1696/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001697static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001698 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001699 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1700 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1701 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1702 return false;
1703
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001704 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1705 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1706
1707 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1708 // to swap the select operands later.
1709 bool Invert = false;
1710 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1711 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1712 Invert = true;
1713 }
1714 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1715
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001716 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1717 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1718 // - They are defined in BB, and
1719 // - They have no side effects, and
1720 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1721 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1722
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001723 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001724 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1725 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001726 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001727 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001728 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001729 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001730 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001731 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1732 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001733
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001734 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001735 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001736 ++SpeculationCost;
1737 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001738 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001739
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001740 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001741 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1742 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1743 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001744 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001745 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001746 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1747 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001748 return false;
1749
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001750 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1751 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1752 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1753
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001754 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001755 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001756 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001757 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001758 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001759 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001760 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1761
1762 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001763 }
1764 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001765
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001766 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1767 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1768 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001769 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1770 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1771 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001772 I != E; ++I)
1773 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001774 ++SpeculationCost;
1775 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001776 return false;
1777 }
1778
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001779 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1780 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001781 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001782 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001783 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1784 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001785
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001786 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001787 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001788 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001789 continue;
1790
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001791 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1792 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1793 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1794 return false;
1795
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001796 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001797 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1798 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1799 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001800 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1801
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001802 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
1803 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001804 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001805 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
1806 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001807 unsigned MaxCost =
1808 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001809 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001810 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001811
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001812 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1813 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1814 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001815 // constant expression.
1816 ++SpeculationCost;
1817 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001818 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001819 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001820
1821 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1822 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001823 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001824 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001825
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001826 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001827 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001828
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001829 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1830 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001831 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001832 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1833 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1834 if (Invert)
1835 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00001836 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
1837 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001838 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1839 }
1840
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001841 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
1842 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001843 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00001844 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
1845
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001846 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001847 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
1848 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001849
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001850 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001851 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001852 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1853 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1854 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1855 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1856 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1857 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1858
1859 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1860 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1861 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001862
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001863 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001864 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1865 // destinations were inverted.
1866 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001867 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001868 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00001869 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
1870 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001871 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1872 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001873 }
1874
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001875 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001876 return true;
1877}
1878
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001879/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001880static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1881 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001882 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001883
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001884 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001885 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1886 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001887 if (Size > 10)
1888 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001889 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001890
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001891 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001892 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001893 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1894 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001895 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
1896 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001897 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001898
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001899 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1900 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001901
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001902 return true;
1903}
1904
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001905/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
1906/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
1907/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001908static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001909 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1910 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001911 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1912 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001913 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1914 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001915
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001916 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1917 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001918 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001919 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001920 }
1921
1922 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001923 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
1924 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001925
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001926 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00001927 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00001928 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
1929 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
1930 }))
1931 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001932
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001933 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1934 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001935 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001936 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001937 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
1938 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001939
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001940 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1941 // branch to RealDest.
1942 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1943 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001944
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001945 if (RealDest == BB)
1946 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001947 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001948 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
1949 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001950
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001951 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1952 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1953 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1954 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001955 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
1956 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
1957 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001958 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001959
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001960 // Update PHI nodes.
1961 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001962
1963 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1964 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1965 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1966 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001967 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001968 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1969 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1970 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1971 continue;
1972 }
1973 // Clone the instruction.
1974 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001975 if (BBI->hasName())
1976 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001977
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001978 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001979 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
1980 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001981 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1982 *i = PI->second;
1983 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001984
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001985 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001986 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001987 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1988 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
1989 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
1990 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
1991 N = nullptr;
1992 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001993 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001994 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001995 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001996 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00001997 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1998 if (N)
1999 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002000 }
2001
2002 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2003 // to EdgeBB instead.
2004 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2005 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2006 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2007 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2008 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2009 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002010
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002011 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002012 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002013 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002014
2015 return false;
2016}
2017
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002018/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2019/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002020static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2021 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002022 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2023 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2024 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2025 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2026 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2027 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002028 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2029 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2030 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002031 if (!IfCond ||
2032 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2033 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2034 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002035
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002036 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2037 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2038 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2039 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2040 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2041 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2042 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2043 if (NumPhis > 2)
2044 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002045
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002046 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2047 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2048 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002049 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002050 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2051 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002052 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2053 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002054
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002055 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2056 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002057 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002058 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002059 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002060 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002061 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002062
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002063 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002064 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002065 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002066 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002067 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002068 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002069
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002070 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002071 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2072 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002073 if (!PN)
2074 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002075
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002076 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2077 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2078 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2079 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2080 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2081 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2082 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002083
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002084 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2085 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2086 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2087 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002088 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002089 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2090 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2091 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002092 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002093 } else {
2094 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002095 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2096 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002097 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002098 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002099 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2100 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002101 return false;
2102 }
2103 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002104
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002105 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002106 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002107 } else {
2108 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002109 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2110 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002111 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002112 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002113 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2114 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002115 return false;
2116 }
2117 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002118
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002119 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002120 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002121
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002122 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2123 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002124 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002125 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002126
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002127 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2128 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002129 if (IfBlock1) {
2130 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2131 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002132 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002133 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002134 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002135 }
2136 if (IfBlock2) {
2137 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2138 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002139 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002140 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002141 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002142 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002143
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002144 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2145 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002146 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002147 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002148
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002149 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2150 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2151 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002152 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002153 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002154
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002155 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2156 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2157 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2158 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002159 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2160 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002161 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002162 return true;
2163}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002164
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002165/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2166/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002167/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002168static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002169 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002170 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2171 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2172 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2173 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2174 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002175
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002176 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2177 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2178 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002179 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002180 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002181 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002182 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002183
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002184 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002185 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2186 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2187 // branch into a return.
2188 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2189 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2190 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002191 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002192 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002193 return true;
2194 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002195
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002196 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2197 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2198 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2199 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002200
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002201 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2202 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2203 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2204 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2205 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2206 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2207 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002208
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002209 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2210 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2211 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2212 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2213 // safe.
2214 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2215 if (TCV->canTrap())
2216 return false;
2217 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2218 if (FCV->canTrap())
2219 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002220
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002221 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2222 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2223 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2224 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002225
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002226 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2227 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002228 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002229 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002230 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2231 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2232 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2233 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002234 TrueValue =
2235 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002236 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002237 }
2238
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002239 Value *RI =
2240 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002241
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002242 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002243
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002244 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002245 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002246 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002247
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002248 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2249
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002250 return true;
2251}
2252
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002253/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002254/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002255static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002256 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2257 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002258 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2259 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002260 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2261 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2262 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2263 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2264 return true;
2265 }
2266 }
2267 return false;
2268}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002269
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002270/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2271/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2272/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2273static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2274 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2275 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2276 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2277 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2278 bool PredHasWeights =
2279 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2280 bool SuccHasWeights =
2281 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2282 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2283 if (!PredHasWeights)
2284 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2285 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2286 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2287 return true;
2288 } else {
2289 return false;
2290 }
2291}
2292
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002293/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2294/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2295/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002296bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002297 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002298
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002299 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002300 if (BI->isConditional())
2301 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2302 else {
2303 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2304 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2305 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2306 // predecessor.
2307 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2308 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2309 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2310 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2311 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002312 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002313 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002314 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2315 Cond = Curr;
2316 break;
2317 }
2318 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2319 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2320 return false;
2321 }
2322 }
2323
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002324 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002325 return false;
2326 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002327
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002328 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2329 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002330 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002331
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002332 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002333 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002334
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002335 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002336 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2337 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002338
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002339 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002340 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002341
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002342 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2343 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2344 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2345 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2346 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2347 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002348 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002349 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2350 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2351 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002352 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002353 return false;
2354 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2355 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2356 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2357 return false;
2358 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2359 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2360 // and Cond.
2361 ++NumBonusInsts;
2362 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2363 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2364 return false;
2365 }
2366
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002367 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2368 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2369 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2370 if (CE->canTrap())
2371 return false;
2372 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2373 if (CE->canTrap())
2374 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002375
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002376 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002377 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002378 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002379 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2380 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002381
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002382 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2383 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002384 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002385
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002386 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2387 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2388 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002389 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002390 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002391 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002392 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2393 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002394 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002395
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002396 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002397 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002398 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002399
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002400 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002401 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002402 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002403 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002404 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002405 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2406 Opc = Instruction::And;
2407 InvertPredCond = true;
2408 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2409 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2410 InvertPredCond = true;
2411 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002412 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002413 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002414 } else {
2415 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2416 continue;
2417 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002418
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002419 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002420 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002421
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002422 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2423 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002424 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002425
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002426 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2427 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2428 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2429 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002430 NewCond =
2431 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002432 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002433
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002434 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002435 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002436 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002437
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002438 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002439 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002440 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2441 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2442 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002443 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002444 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002445 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002446 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2447 continue;
2448 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2449 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002450 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002451 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002452
2453 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2454 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2455 // only given the branch precondition.
2456 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2457 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002458 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002459
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002460 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2461 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002462 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002463 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002464
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002465 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2466 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002467 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002468 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002469 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002470 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002471 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002472 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002473
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002474 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002475 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2476 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002477 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2478
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002479 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002480 bool HasWeights =
2481 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2482 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002483 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2484
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002485 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002486 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002487 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2488 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002489 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002490 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002491 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002492 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2493 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2494 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002495 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2496 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2497 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002498 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002499 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2500 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2501 }
2502 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002503 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002504 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2505 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002506 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002507 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002508 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2509 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2510 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2511 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002512 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2513 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002514 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2515 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2516 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002517 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2518 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2519 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2520
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002521 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2522 NewWeights.end());
2523 PBI->setMetadata(
2524 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2525 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002526 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002527 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002528 } else {
2529 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2530 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002531 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002532 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002533 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002534 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002535 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2536 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2537 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2538 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002539 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2540 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2541 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2542 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002543 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002544 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2545 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002546 } else {
2547 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2548 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2549 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002550 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2551 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002552 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002553 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2554 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2555 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2556 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002557 }
2558 }
2559 // Update PHI Node.
2560 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2561 MergedCond);
2562 }
2563 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2564 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2565 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2566 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002567 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002568
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002569 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2570 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2571
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002572 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002573 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2574 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2575 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002576
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002577 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002578 }
2579 return false;
2580}
2581
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002582// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2583// nullptr.
2584static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2585 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2586 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2587 if (!BB)
2588 continue;
2589 for (auto &I : *BB)
2590 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2591 if (S)
2592 // Multiple stores seen.
2593 return nullptr;
2594 else
2595 S = SI;
2596 }
2597 }
2598 return S;
2599}
2600
2601static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2602 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2603 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2604 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2605 //
2606 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2607 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2608 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2609 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2610 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2611 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2612 // one.
2613 //
2614 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2615 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2616 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2617 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2618 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002619
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002620 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2621 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2622 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2623 if (!AlternativeV)
2624 break;
2625
2626 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2627 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2628 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2629 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2630 break;
2631 PHI = nullptr;
2632 }
2633 if (PHI)
2634 return PHI;
2635
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002636 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2637 if (!AlternativeV &&
2638 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2639 return V;
2640
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002641 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002642 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2643 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2644 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002645 PHI->addIncoming(
2646 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002647 return PHI;
2648}
2649
2650static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2651 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2652 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2653 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2654 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2655 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2656 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2657 };
2658
2659 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2660 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2661 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2662 if (!BB)
2663 return true;
2664 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2665 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2666 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002667 unsigned N = 0;
2668 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2669 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2670 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2671 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2672 ++N;
2673 // Free instructions.
2674 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2675 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2676 continue;
2677 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002678 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002679 }
2680 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002681 };
2682
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002683 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2684 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2685 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002686 return false;
2687
2688 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2689 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2690 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2691 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2692 // testing.
2693 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2694 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2695 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2696 return false;
2697
2698 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2699 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2700 return false;
2701
2702 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2703 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2704 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2705 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2706 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2707 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2708 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2709 //
2710 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2711 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2712 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2713 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2714 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2715 return false;
2716 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2717 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2718 return false;
2719 if (QTB)
2720 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2721 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2722 return false;
2723 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2724 I != E; ++I)
2725 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2726 return false;
2727
2728 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2729 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2730 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2731 ->getCondition();
2732 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2733 ->getCondition();
2734
2735 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2736 PStore->getParent());
2737 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2738 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2739
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002740 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2741
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002742 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2743 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2744
2745 if (InvertPCond)
2746 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2747 if (InvertQCond)
2748 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2749 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2750
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002751 auto *T =
2752 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002753 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2754 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2755 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2756 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2757 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2758 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2759
2760 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2761 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002762
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002763 return true;
2764}
2765
2766static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2767 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2768 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
2769 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
2770 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
2771 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
2772 // PBI and QBI.
2773 //
2774 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
2775 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
2776 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
2777 // sequences can be if-converted away.
2778 //
2779 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
2780 //
2781 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
2782 // / \ | \
2783 // PTB PFB | PFB
2784 // \ / | /
2785 // QBI QBI
2786 // / \ | \
2787 // QTB QFB | QFB
2788 // \ / | /
2789 // PostBB PostBB
2790 //
2791 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
2792 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
2793 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002794 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002795 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
2796 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
2797 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
2798 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
2799 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
2800
2801 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
2802 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
2803 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
2804 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
2805 InvertPCond = true;
2806 }
2807 if (QFB == PostBB) {
2808 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
2809 InvertQCond = true;
2810 }
2811
2812 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
2813 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
2814 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
2815 PTB = nullptr;
2816 if (QTB == PostBB)
2817 QTB = nullptr;
2818
2819 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
2820 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
2821 // predecessor.
2822 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002823 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002824 };
2825 if (!PostBB ||
2826 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
2827 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
2828 return false;
2829 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
2830 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
2831 return false;
2832 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
2833 return false;
2834
2835 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
2836 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002837 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002838 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
2839 if (!BB)
2840 continue;
2841 for (auto &I : *BB)
2842 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2843 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2844 }
2845 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
2846 if (!BB)
2847 continue;
2848 for (auto &I : *BB)
2849 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
2850 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
2851 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002852
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002853 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
2854 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
2855 // clear what it contains.
2856 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
2857
2858 bool Changed = false;
2859 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
2860 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
2861 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
2862 return Changed;
2863}
2864
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002865/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
2866/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002867/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2868/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002869static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2870 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002871 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2872 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002873
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002874 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002875 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002876 // this conditional branch redundant.
2877 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2878 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2879 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2880 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2881 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2882 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2883 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002884 BI->setCondition(
2885 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
2886 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002887 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002888
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002889 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2890 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2891 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2892 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002893 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002894 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
2895 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
2896 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002897 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2898 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2899 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002900 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002901 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002902 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
2903 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002904 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2905 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002906 NewPN->addIncoming(
2907 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
2908 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002909 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002910 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002911 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002912 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002913
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002914 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002915 return true;
2916 }
2917 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002918
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00002919 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2920 if (CE->canTrap())
2921 return false;
2922
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002923 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
2924 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
2925 // merged store at the end.
2926 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
2927 return true;
2928
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002929 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002930 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002931 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002932 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2933 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2934 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2935 ++BBI;
2936 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002937 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002938
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002939 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002940 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2941 PBIOp = 0;
2942 BIOp = 0;
2943 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2944 PBIOp = 0;
2945 BIOp = 1;
2946 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
2947 PBIOp = 1;
2948 BIOp = 0;
2949 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2950 PBIOp = 1;
2951 BIOp = 1;
2952 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002953 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002954 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002955
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002956 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2957 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2958 // keep getting unwound.
2959 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2960 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002961
2962 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002963 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2964 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002965
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002966 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2967 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2968 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2969
2970 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002971 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002972 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
2973 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002974 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2975 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002976
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002977 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2978 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2979 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2980 if (CE->canTrap())
2981 return false;
2982
2983 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2984 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2985 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2986 if (CE->canTrap())
2987 return false;
2988 }
2989
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002990 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002991 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002992
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002993 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002994 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002995
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002996 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2997 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2998 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2999 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3000 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3001 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3002 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3003 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3004 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3005 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003006 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3007 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003008 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3009 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003010 }
3011
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003012 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003013
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003014 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3015 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003016
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003017 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3018 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003019 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003020 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003021 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003022
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003023 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3024 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003025 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003026
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003027 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003028 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003029
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003030 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3031 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3032 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3033 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003034
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003035 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3036 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003037 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003038 bool HasWeights =
3039 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3040 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003041 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003042 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3043 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3044 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3045 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003046 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3047 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3048 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003049 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3050 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3051 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003052 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003053 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3054
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003055 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003056 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3057 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003058 }
3059
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003060 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3061 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003062 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003063
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003064 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3065 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3066 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3067 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003068 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003069 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3070 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3071 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3072 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3073 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3074 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3075 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003076 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3077 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003078 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003079 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3080 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3081 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3082 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003083 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003084 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3085 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3086 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3087 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3088 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3089 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3090 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3091 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3092
3093 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3094
3095 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3096 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3097 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3098 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003099 }
3100 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003101
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003102 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3103 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003104
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003105 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3106 // one fewer predecessor.
3107 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003108}
3109
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003110// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3111// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003112// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3113// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3114// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3115static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003116 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3117 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003118 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003119 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3120 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3121 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3122 // successor.
3123 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003124 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003125
3126 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003127 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003128 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3129 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003130 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003131 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003132 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003133 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003134 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3135 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003136 }
3137
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003138 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3139 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3140
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003141 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003142 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003143 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3144 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3145 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003146 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003147 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003148 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3149 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003150 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3151 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3152 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003153 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3154 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003155 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003156 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3157 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3158 // terminator must be unreachable.
3159 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3160 } else {
3161 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3162 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3163 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003164 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003165 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003166 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003167 else
3168 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003169 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003170 }
3171
3172 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3173 return true;
3174}
3175
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003176// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003177// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3178// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3179// unconditional otherwise.
3180static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3181 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3182 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3183 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3184 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3185 return false;
3186
3187 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3188 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003189 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3190 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003191
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003192 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3193 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3194 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3195 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3196 if (HasWeights) {
3197 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3198 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003199 TrueWeight =
3200 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3201 FalseWeight =
3202 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003203 }
3204 }
3205
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003206 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003207 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3208 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003209}
3210
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003211// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003212// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3213// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3214// with
3215// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3216static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3217 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3218 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3219 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3220 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3221 return false;
3222
3223 // Extract the actual blocks.
3224 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3225 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3226
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003227 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003228 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3229 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003230}
3231
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003232/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3233/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003234/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3235/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3236/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3237/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3238/// like:
3239///
3240/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3241/// DEFAULT:
3242/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3243/// br label %end
3244/// end:
3245/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003246///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003247/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3248/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003249static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003250 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
3251 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
3252 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003253 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003254
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003255 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3256 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003257 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3258 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003259
3260 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3261 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003262
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003263 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3264 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3265 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3266 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003267 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3268 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003269
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003270 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3271 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3272 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003273
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003274 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3275 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3276 // away.
3277 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3278 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3279 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3280 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003281
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003282 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003283 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003284 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3285 }
3286 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003287 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003288 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003289
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003290 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3291 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3292 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003293 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003294 Value *V;
3295 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3296 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3297 else
3298 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003299
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003300 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3301 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3302 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003303 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003304 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003305
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003306 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3307 // the block.
3308 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003309 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003310 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003311 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3312 return false;
3313
3314 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3315 // true in the PHI.
3316 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003317 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003318
3319 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3320 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3321
3322 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3323 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3324 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3325 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3326
3327 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3328 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003329 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3330 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003331 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3332 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3333 if (HasWeights) {
3334 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3335 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3336 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003337 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003338 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3339
3340 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003341 SI->setMetadata(
3342 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3343 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003344 }
3345 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003346 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003347
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003348 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003349 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3350 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3351 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003352 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3353 return true;
3354}
3355
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003356/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003357/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3358/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003359static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3360 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003361 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003362 if (!Cond)
3363 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003364
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003365 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3366 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3367 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003368
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003369 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003370 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3371 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003372 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003373 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3374 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3375 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003376
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003377 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003378 if (!CompVal)
3379 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003380
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003381 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3382 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3383 return false;
3384
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003385 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3386
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003387 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3388 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3389 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3390 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003391
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003392 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003393 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003394 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3395 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003396
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003397 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3398 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3399
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003400 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3401 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003402 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3403 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3404 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003405
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003406 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003407
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003408 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003409 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3410 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003411
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003412 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3413 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3414 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3415 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003416 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3417 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003418 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3419 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003420 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3421
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003422 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003423 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003424 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003425 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003426
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003427 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003428
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003429 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3430 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003431 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003432
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003433 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003434 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003435 BB = NewBB;
3436 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003437
3438 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003439 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3440 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003441 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3442 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003443 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003444
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003445 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003446 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003447
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003448 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3449 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3450 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003451
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003452 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3453 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3454 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003455 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003456 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3457 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003458 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003459 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3460 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003461
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003462 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3463 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003464
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003465 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003466 return true;
3467}
3468
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003469bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003470 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3471 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3472 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3473 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3474 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3475 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003476
3477 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003478}
3479
3480// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3481bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3482 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3483
3484 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3485 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3486 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003487 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003488 while (++I != E)
3489 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3490 return false;
3491
3492 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3493 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3494
3495 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003496 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3497 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003498 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3499 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3500
3501 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3502 // it has other dependents.
3503 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3504 continue;
3505
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003506 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003507 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3508 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3509 continue;
3510
3511 bool isTrivial = true;
3512
3513 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3514 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3515 while (++I != E)
3516 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3517 isTrivial = false;
3518 break;
3519 }
3520
3521 if (isTrivial)
3522 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3523 }
3524
3525 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003526 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3527 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003528
3529 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3530 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3531 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3532 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3533 // to remove them all.
3534 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3535 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3536
3537 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3538 PI != PE;) {
3539 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3540 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3541 }
3542
3543 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3544 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3545 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3546 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3547 // predecessors.
3548 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3549 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3550 }
3551
3552 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3553 if (pred_empty(BB))
3554 BB->eraseFromParent();
3555
3556 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3557}
3558
3559// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3560bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003561 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3562 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003563 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3564 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003565
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003566 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3567 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003568 while (++I != E)
3569 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3570 return false;
3571
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003572 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003573 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3574 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3575 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003576 }
3577
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003578 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3579 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003580 if (LoopHeaders)
3581 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003582 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003583}
3584
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003585static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003586 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3587 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3588 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3589 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3590 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3591 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3592 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3593 // simplified.
3594 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003595 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3596 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003597 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3598 return false;
3599
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003600 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3601 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3602 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3603 return false;
3604
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003605 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003606 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003607 while (++I != E) {
3608 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3609 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003610 return false;
3611
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003612 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3613 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3614 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3615 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3616 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3617 break;
3618 default:
3619 return false;
3620 }
3621 }
3622
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003623 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3624 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003625 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003626 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003627
3628 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3629 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3630 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3631 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3632 // are both EH pads).
3633 if (UnwindDest) {
3634 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3635 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003636 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003637 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003638 I != IE; ++I) {
3639 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003640
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003641 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003642 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003643 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003644 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3645 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3646 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3647 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3648 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3649 // pad being removed.
3650 //
3651 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3652 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3653 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3654 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3655 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3656 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3657
3658 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3659 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3660
3661 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3662 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3663 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3664 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003665 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003666 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003667 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3668 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3669 }
3670 } else {
3671 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3672 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3673 // predecessors with this value.
3674 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3675 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3676 }
3677 }
3678 }
3679
3680 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003681 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003682 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3683 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003684 I != IE;) {
3685 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3686 // being moved to another block.
3687 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3688 if (PN->use_empty())
3689 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3690 // when we erase BB below.
3691 continue;
3692
3693 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3694 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3695 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3696 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3697 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3698 if (pred != BB)
3699 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3700 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3701 }
3702 }
3703
3704 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3705 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3706 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003707 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003708 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003709 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003710 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003711 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003712 }
3713 }
3714
3715 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3716 BB->eraseFromParent();
3717 return true;
3718}
3719
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003720// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3721static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3722 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3723 // with.
3724 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3725 if (!UnwindDest)
3726 return false;
3727
3728 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3729 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3730 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3731 return false;
3732
3733 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3734 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3735 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3736 return false;
3737
3738 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3739 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3740 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3741 // funclet bundle operands.
3742 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3743 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3744 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3745 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3746 // destination.
3747 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3748 RI->eraseFromParent();
3749
3750 return true;
3751}
3752
3753bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003754 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3755 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3756 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3757 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3758 return false;
3759
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003760 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003761 return true;
3762
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003763 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003764 return true;
3765
3766 return false;
3767}
3768
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003769bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003770 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003771 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
3772 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003773
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003774 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003775 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
3776 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00003777 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
3778 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003779 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
3780 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
3781 if (BI->isUnconditional())
3782 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
3783 else
3784 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
3785 }
3786 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003787
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003788 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003789 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003790 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3791 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
3792 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003793 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00003794 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003795 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003796
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003797 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003798 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003799 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3800 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003801 if (LoopHeaders)
3802 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00003803 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003804
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003805 return true;
3806 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003807
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003808 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
3809 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
3810 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
3811 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
3812 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003813
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003814 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
3815 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
3816 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003817 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003818 return true;
3819 }
3820 return false;
3821}
3822
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003823bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
3824 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003825
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003826 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003827
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003828 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
3829 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003830 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
3831 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003832 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003833 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
3834 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
3835 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003836 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3837 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003838
3839 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003840 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003841 if (SI->isVolatile())
3842 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003843 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003844 if (LI->isVolatile())
3845 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003846 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003847 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3848 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003849 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003850 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3851 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003852 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
3853 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
3854 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
3855 // default.
3856 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
3857 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
3858 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
3859 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003860 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3861 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003862 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003863 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003864 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3865 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3866 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3867 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003868 }
3869
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003870 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3871 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3872 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003873 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003874 Changed = true;
3875 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003876
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003877 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3878 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003879 if (&BB->front() != UI)
3880 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003881
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003882 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003883 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3884 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003885 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003886 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003887 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3888 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3889 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3890 TI->eraseFromParent();
3891 Changed = true;
3892 }
3893 } else {
3894 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003895 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003896 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3897 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003898 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003899 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3900 Changed = true;
3901 }
3902 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003903 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003904 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
3905 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003906 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003907 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3908 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003909 --i;
3910 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003911 Changed = true;
3912 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00003913 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3914 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3915 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3916 Changed = true;
3917 }
3918 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
3919 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3920 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
3921 Changed = true;
3922 continue;
3923 }
3924
3925 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
3926 E = CSI->handler_end();
3927 I != E; ++I) {
3928 if (*I == BB) {
3929 CSI->removeHandler(I);
3930 --I;
3931 --E;
3932 Changed = true;
3933 }
3934 }
3935 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
3936 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
3937 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
3938 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
3939 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
3940 } else {
3941 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
3942 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
3943 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
3944 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
3945 }
3946 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
3947 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
3948 CSI->eraseFromParent();
3949 Changed = true;
3950 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003951 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003952 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3953 TI->eraseFromParent();
3954 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003955 }
3956 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003957
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003958 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003959 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003960 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3961 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003962 if (LoopHeaders)
3963 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003964 return true;
3965 }
3966
3967 return Changed;
3968}
3969
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003970static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
3971 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
3972
3973 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3974 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3975 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
3976 return false;
3977 }
3978 return true;
3979}
3980
3981/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
3982/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003983static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003984 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003985
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003986 bool HasDefault =
3987 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003988
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003989 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
3990 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
3991 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003992 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
3993 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003994
3995 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
3996 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003997 if (!DestA)
3998 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00003999 if (Dest == DestA) {
4000 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4001 continue;
4002 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004003 if (!DestB)
4004 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004005 if (Dest == DestB) {
4006 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4007 continue;
4008 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004009 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004010 }
4011
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004012 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4013 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004014 assert(DestA != DestB);
4015 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4016 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4017 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4018
4019 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4020 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4021 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4022 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4023 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4024 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4025 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4026 OtherDest = DestB;
4027 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4028 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4029 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4030 OtherDest = DestA;
4031 } else
4032 return false;
4033
4034 // Start building the compare and branch.
4035
4036 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004037 Constant *NumCases =
4038 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004039
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004040 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4041 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004042 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4043
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004044 Value *Cmp;
4045 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004046 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004047 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4048 else
4049 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004050 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004051
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004052 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004053 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4054 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004055 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4056 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004057 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4058 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4059 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4060 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4061 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4062 else
4063 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4064 }
4065 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4066 TrueWeight /= 2;
4067 FalseWeight /= 2;
4068 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004069 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004070 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4071 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4072 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004073 }
4074 }
4075
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004076 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4077 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4078 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004079 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4080 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004081 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004082 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4083 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004084 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4085 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004086 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4087 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004088 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4089 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4090 }
4091
4092 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004093 SI->eraseFromParent();
4094
4095 return true;
4096}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004097
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004098/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004099/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004100static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
4101 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004102 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004103 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004104 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Chandler Carruth66b31302015-01-04 12:03:27 +00004105 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004106
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004107 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4108 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4109 // bits are in the condition value.
4110 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
4111 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4112
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004113 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004114 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004115 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004116 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4117 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4118 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004119 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004120 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004121 }
4122 }
4123
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004124 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4125 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004126 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4127 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004128 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004129 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4130 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4131 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004132 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004133 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004134 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004135 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004136 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004137 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4138 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004139 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4140 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004141 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4142 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4143 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4144 return true;
4145 }
4146
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004147 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4148 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4149 if (HasWeight) {
4150 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4151 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4152 }
4153
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004154 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004155 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4156 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004157 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004158 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004159 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004160 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004161 Weights.pop_back();
4162 }
4163
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004164 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004165 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004166 SI->removeCase(Case);
4167 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004168 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004169 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4170 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004171 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4172 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004173 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004174
4175 return !DeadCases.empty();
4176}
4177
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004178/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4179/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004180/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4181/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4182/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4183static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004184 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004185 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004186 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004187 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004188 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004189
4190 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4191 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004192 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004193
4194 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4195
4196 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4197 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4198 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4199 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4200
4201 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004202 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4203 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004204
4205 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4206 return PHI;
4207 }
4208
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004209 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004210}
4211
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004212/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4213/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4214/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004215/// Returns true if a change is made.
4216static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004217 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004218 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4219
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004220 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4221 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004222 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4223 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004224
4225 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004226 PHINode *PHI =
4227 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4228 if (!PHI)
4229 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004230
4231 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4232 }
4233
4234 bool Changed = false;
4235
4236 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004237 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4238 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004239 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004240 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004241
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004242 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4243 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004244
4245 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4246 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4247 Changed = true;
4248 }
4249
4250 return Changed;
4251}
4252
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004253/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004254/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00004255static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004256 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4257 return false;
4258 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4259 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004260
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004261 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
4262 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
4263
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004264 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) || isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
4265 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) || isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
4266 isa<UndefValue>(C);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004267}
4268
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004269/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004270/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004271static Constant *
4272LookupConstant(Value *V,
4273 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004274 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4275 return C;
4276 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4277}
4278
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004279/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004280/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4281/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004282/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004283static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004284ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4285 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004286 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004287 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4288 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004289 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004290 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4291 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4292 if (A->isNullValue())
4293 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004294 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004295 }
4296
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004297 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4298 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4299 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4300 COps.push_back(A);
4301 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004302 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004303 }
4304
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004305 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004306 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4307 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004308 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004309
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004310 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004311}
4312
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004313/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004314/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004315/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004316/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004317static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004318GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004319 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004320 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
4321 const DataLayout &DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004322 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4323 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4324
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004325 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4326 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004327 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004328 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4329 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4330 ++I) {
4331 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4332 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
4333 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
4334 return false;
4335 Pred = CaseDest;
4336 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4337 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4338 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4339 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004340 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004341 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004342
4343 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4344 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4345 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4346 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4347 User *User = Use.getUser();
4348 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4349 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4350 continue;
4351 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4352 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4353 continue;
4354 return false;
4355 }
4356
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004357 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004358 } else {
4359 break;
4360 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004361 }
4362
4363 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4364 if (!*CommonDest)
4365 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4366 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4367 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4368 return false;
4369
4370 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4371 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4372 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4373 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4374 if (Idx == -1)
4375 continue;
4376
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004377 Constant *ConstVal =
4378 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004379 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004380 return false;
4381
4382 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
4383 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
4384 return false;
4385
4386 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4387 }
4388
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004389 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004390}
4391
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004392// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4393// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004394static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004395 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4396 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004397 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4398 if (I.first == Result) {
4399 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4400 return;
4401 }
4402 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004403 UniqueResults.push_back(
4404 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004405}
4406
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004407// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004408// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4409// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4410// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004411static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4412 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4413 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4414 Constant *&DefaultResult,
4415 const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004416 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4417 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4418
4419 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4420 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4421 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
4422 DL))
4423 return false;
4424
4425 // Only one value per case is permitted
4426 if (Results.size() > 1)
4427 return false;
4428 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4429
4430 // Check the PHI consistency.
4431 if (!PHI)
4432 PHI = Results[0].first;
4433 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4434 return false;
4435 }
4436 // Find the default result value.
4437 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4438 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4439 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
4440 DL);
4441 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4442 // is unreachable.
4443 DefaultResult =
4444 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4445 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004446 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004447 return false;
4448
4449 return true;
4450}
4451
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004452// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4453// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004454// Example:
4455// switch (a) {
4456// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4457// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4458// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4459// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4460// default:
4461// return 4;
4462// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004463static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4464 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4465 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004466 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004467 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004468 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4469 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4470 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4471 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4472 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4473 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4474
4475 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4476 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4477 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4478 Value *const ValueCompare =
4479 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4480 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4481 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4482 }
4483 Value *const ValueCompare =
4484 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004485 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4486 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004487 }
4488
4489 return nullptr;
4490}
4491
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004492// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4493// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004494static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4495 Value *SelectValue,
4496 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4497 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4498 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4499 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4500 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4501
4502 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4503
4504 // Remove the switch.
4505 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4506 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4507
4508 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4509 continue;
4510 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4511 }
4512 SI->eraseFromParent();
4513}
4514
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004515/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004516/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4517/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4518static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004519 AssumptionCache *AC, const DataLayout &DL) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004520 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4521 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4522 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4523 Constant *DefaultResult;
4524 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4525 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004526 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
4527 DL))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004528 return false;
4529 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4530 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4531 return false;
4532 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4533
4534 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004535 Value *SelectValue =
4536 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004537 if (SelectValue) {
4538 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4539 return true;
4540 }
4541 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4542 return false;
4543}
4544
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004545namespace {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004546/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4547class SwitchLookupTable {
4548public:
4549 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4550 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4551 SwitchLookupTable(
4552 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4553 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4554 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004555
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004556 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4557 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4558 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004559
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004560 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4561 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4562 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4563 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004564
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004565private:
4566 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4567 // different ways.
4568 enum {
4569 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4570 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4571 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004572
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004573 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4574 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4575 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4576 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004577
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004578 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4579 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4580 // shift and mask operations.
4581 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004582
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004583 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4584 // instructions from the table.
4585 ArrayKind
4586 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004587
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004588 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4589 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004590
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004591 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4592 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4593 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004594
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004595 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4596 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4597 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004598
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004599 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4600 GlobalVariable *Array;
4601};
Alexander Kornienkof00654e2015-06-23 09:49:53 +00004602}
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004603
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004604SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4605 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4606 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4607 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004608 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004609 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004610 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4611 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004612
4613 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004614 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004615
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004616 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4617
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004618 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004619 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004620 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4621 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4622 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004623 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004624
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004625 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004626 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4627
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004628 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004629 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004630 }
4631
4632 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004633 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004634 assert(DefaultValue &&
4635 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004636 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004637 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4638 if (!TableContents[I])
4639 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004640 }
4641
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004642 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004643 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004644 }
4645
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004646 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4647 // that single value.
4648 if (SingleValue) {
4649 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4650 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004651 }
4652
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004653 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4654 // table index.
4655 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4656 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4657 APInt PrevVal;
4658 APInt DistToPrev;
4659 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4660 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4661 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4662 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4663 if (!ConstVal) {
4664 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4665 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4666 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4667 break;
4668 }
4669 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4670 if (I != 0) {
4671 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4672 if (I == 1) {
4673 DistToPrev = Dist;
4674 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4675 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4676 break;
4677 }
4678 }
4679 PrevVal = Val;
4680 }
4681 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4682 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4683 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4684 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4685 ++NumLinearMaps;
4686 return;
4687 }
4688 }
4689
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004690 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004691 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004692 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004693 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4694 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4695 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004696 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4697 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4698 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4699 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4700 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004701 }
4702 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4703 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4704 Kind = BitMapKind;
4705 ++NumBitMaps;
4706 return;
4707 }
4708
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004709 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004710 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004711 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4712
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004713 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4714 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004715 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004716 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004717 Kind = ArrayKind;
4718}
4719
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004720Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004721 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004722 case SingleValueKind:
4723 return SingleValue;
4724 case LinearMapKind: {
4725 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4726 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4727 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4728 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4729 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4730 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4731 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4732 return Result;
4733 }
4734 case BitMapKind: {
4735 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4736 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004737
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004738 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4739 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4740 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4741 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004742
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004743 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4744 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4745 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4746 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004747
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004748 // Shift down.
4749 Value *DownShifted =
4750 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4751 // Mask off.
4752 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4753 }
4754 case ArrayKind: {
4755 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4756 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
4757 uint64_t TableSize =
4758 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
4759 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
4760 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
4761 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
4762 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00004763
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004764 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
4765 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
4766 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
4767 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
4768 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004769 }
4770 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
4771}
4772
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004773bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004774 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00004775 Type *ElementType) {
4776 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004777 if (!IT)
4778 return false;
4779 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
4780 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004781
4782 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004783 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00004784 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004785 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004786}
4787
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004788/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
4789/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004790static bool
4791ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
4792 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
4793 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004794 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
4795 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004796
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004797 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004798 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004799 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
4800 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004801
4802 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004803 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004804
4805 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004806 AllTablesFitInRegister =
4807 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
4808 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00004809
4810 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
4811 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
4812 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
4813 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004814 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004815 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00004816
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00004817 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
4818 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
4819 return true;
4820
4821 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
4822 if (HasIllegalType)
4823 return false;
4824
4825 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
4826 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
4827 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
4828 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004829}
4830
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004831/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
4832/// \code
4833/// if (idx < tablesize)
4834/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
4835/// else
4836/// r = default_value;
4837/// if (r != default_value)
4838/// ...
4839/// \endcode
4840/// Is optimized to:
4841/// \code
4842/// cond = idx < tablesize;
4843/// if (cond)
4844/// r = table[idx];
4845/// else
4846/// r = default_value;
4847/// if (cond)
4848/// ...
4849/// \endcode
4850/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004851static void reuseTableCompare(
4852 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
4853 Constant *DefaultValue,
4854 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004855
4856 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
4857 if (!CmpInst)
4858 return;
4859
4860 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
4861 // threading can do its work afterwards.
4862 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
4863 return;
4864
4865 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
4866 if (!CmpOp1)
4867 return;
4868
4869 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
4870 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
4871 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
4872
4873 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
4874 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
4875 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
4876 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
4877 return;
4878
4879 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
4880 // compare result.
4881 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
4882 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004883 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004884 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
4885 return;
4886 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
4887 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
4888 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004889
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004890 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
4891 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
4892 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
4893 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
4894 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
4895 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
4896 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
4897 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
4898 return;
4899 }
4900
4901 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
4902 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
4903 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
4904 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4905 } else {
4906 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004907 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
4908 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
4909 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004910 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
4911 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
4912 }
4913}
4914
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004915/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
4916/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
4917/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004918static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4919 const DataLayout &DL,
4920 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004921 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004922
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00004923 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004924 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00004925 return false;
4926
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004927 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
4928 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
4929
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004930 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
4931 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
4932 // string and lookup indices into that.
4933
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004934 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
4935 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00004936 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
4937 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004938 return false;
4939
4940 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00004941 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004942 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
4943 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
4944 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4945 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4946
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004947 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004948 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
4949 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
4950 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
4951 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
4952 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004953
4954 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
4955 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
4956 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
4957 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
4958 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
4959 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
4960
4961 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004962 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004963 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004964 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004965 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004966 return false;
4967
4968 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004969 for (const auto &I : Results) {
4970 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
4971 Constant *Value = I.second;
4972 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
4973 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
4974 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004975 }
4976 }
4977
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004978 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004979 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004980 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
4981 }
4982
4983 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
4984 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
4985 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
4986 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
4987
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004988 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
4989 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004990 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00004991 bool HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004992 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00004993
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004994 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
4995 if (NeedMask) {
4996 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004997 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004998 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004999 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005000 return false;
5001 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005002
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005003 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5004 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5005 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005006 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005007 }
5008
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005009 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005010 return false;
5011
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005012 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005013 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005014 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5015 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005016
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005017 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005018 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005019 Value *TableIndex =
5020 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005021
5022 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5023 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005024 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005025 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005026 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5027 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5028 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5029
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005030 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5031 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5032 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5033 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5034 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5035 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005036 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5037
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005038 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005039 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005040 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5041 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005042 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005043 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5044 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5045 RangeCheckBranch =
5046 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005047 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005048
5049 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5050 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005051
5052 if (NeedMask) {
5053 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5054 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5055 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5056 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5057 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005058 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5059 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005060
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005061 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5062 // unnecessary illegal types.
5063 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5064 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5065 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005066 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005067 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5068 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005069 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5070 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005071 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5072 }
5073 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5074
5075 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5076 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5077 // else continue with table lookup.
5078 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005079 Value *MaskIndex =
5080 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5081 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5082 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5083 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005084 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5085
5086 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5087 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5088 }
5089
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005090 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5091 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5092 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5093 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5094 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5095 }
5096
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005097 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005098 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5099 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005100 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005101
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005102 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5103 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005104 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005105
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005106 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005107
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005108 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5109 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005110 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5111 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005112 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5113 ReturnedEarly = true;
5114 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005115 }
5116
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005117 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5118 // possible.
5119 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5120 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5121 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5122 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5123 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5124 }
5125 }
5126
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005127 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005128 }
5129
5130 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5131 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5132
5133 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005134 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005135 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005136
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005137 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005138 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005139 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5140 }
5141 SI->eraseFromParent();
5142
5143 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005144 if (NeedMask)
5145 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005146 return true;
5147}
5148
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005149static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5150 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5151 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5152 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5153 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5154 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5155 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005156
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005157 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5158}
5159
5160// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5161// of cases.
5162//
5163// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5164// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5165//
5166// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5167// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5168static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5169 const DataLayout &DL,
5170 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5171 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5172 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5173 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5174 return false;
5175 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5176 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5177 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5178 return false;
5179
5180 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5181 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5182 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5183 // as signed.
5184 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5185 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5186 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5187 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5188
5189 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5190 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5191 return false;
5192
5193 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5194 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5195 for (auto &V : Values)
5196 V -= Base;
5197
5198 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5199 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5200 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5201 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5202 for (auto &V : Values)
5203 GCD = llvm::GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
5204
5205 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5206 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5207 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5208 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5209 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5210 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5211 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5212 // as the key function.
5213 if (GCD <= 1 || !llvm::isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
5214 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5215 return false;
5216
5217 unsigned Shift = llvm::Log2_64(GCD);
5218 for (auto &V : Values)
5219 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5220
5221 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5222 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5223 return false;
5224
5225 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5226 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5227 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5228 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5229 //
5230 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5231 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5232 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5233 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005234
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005235 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5236 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5237 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5238 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005239 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5240 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5241 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005242 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5243
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005244 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5245 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005246 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5247 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005248 C.setValue(
5249 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005250 }
5251 return true;
5252}
5253
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005254bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005255 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5256
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005257 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5258 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5259 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5260 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5261 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005262 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005263
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005264 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5265 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5266 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005267 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005268
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005269 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5270 // away into any preds.
5271 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5272 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5273 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5274 ++BBI;
5275 if (SI == &*BBI)
5276 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005277 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005278 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005279
5280 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005281 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005282 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005283
5284 // Remove unreachable cases.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005285 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, AC, DL))
5286 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005287
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005288 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, AC, DL))
5289 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005290
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005291 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005292 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005293
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005294 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5295 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005296
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005297 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5298 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5299
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005300 return false;
5301}
5302
5303bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5304 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5305 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005306
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005307 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5308 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5309 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5310 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005311 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005312 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5313 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005314 --i;
5315 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005316 Changed = true;
5317 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005318 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005319
5320 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5321 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5322 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5323 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5324 return true;
5325 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005326
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005327 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5328 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5329 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5330 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5331 return true;
5332 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005333
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005334 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5335 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005336 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005337 }
5338 return Changed;
5339}
5340
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005341/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5342/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5343/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5344/// a shared handler.
5345///
5346/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5347/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5348/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5349/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5350/// sinking in this file)
5351///
5352/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5353/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5354/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5355/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5356/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5357/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5358///
5359/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5360/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5361/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5362static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5363 BasicBlock *BB) {
5364 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5365 assert(Succ);
5366 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5367 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5368 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5369 return false;
5370
5371 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5372 if (BB == OtherPred)
5373 continue;
5374 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5375 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5376 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5377 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005378 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5379 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005380 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5381 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5382 continue;
5383
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005384 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005385 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5386 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5387 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5388 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5389 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005390 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5391 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005392 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5393 }
5394
5395 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5396 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005397 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5398 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5399 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005400 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5401 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5402 }
5403
5404 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5405 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5406 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5407 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5408 }
5409
5410 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5411 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5412 BI->eraseFromParent();
5413 return true;
5414 }
5415 return false;
5416}
5417
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005418bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5419 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005420 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005421
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005422 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5423 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005424
5425 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5426 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005427 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5428 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5429 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5430 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005431 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005432 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005433 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005434 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5435 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005436
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005437 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5438 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5439 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5440 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5441 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5442 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005443 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005444 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
5445 BonusInstThreshold, AC))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005446 return true;
5447 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005448
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005449 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5450 // equivalent.
5451 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005452 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5453 }
5454 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005455 return true;
5456 }
5457
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005458 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5459 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5460 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5461 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005462 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5463 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005464 return false;
5465}
5466
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005467static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5468 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5469 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5470 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5471 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5472 return nullptr;
5473 PredPred = PPred;
5474 }
5475 return PredPred;
5476}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005477
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005478bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005479 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005480
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005481 // Conditional branch
5482 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5483 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5484 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5485 // switch.
5486 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005487 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005488 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005489
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005490 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5491 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5492 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5493 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5494 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5495 ++I;
5496 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005497 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005498 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005499 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005500 ++I;
5501 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5502 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5503 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005504 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005505 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005506 }
5507 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005508
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005509 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005510 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005511 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005512
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005513 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5514 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5515 // of the BI branch.
5516 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5517 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5518 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5519 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5520 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5521 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5522 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5523 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5524 if (Implication) {
5525 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5526 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5527 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5528 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5529 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5530 BI->setCondition(CI);
5531 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
5532 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
5533 }
5534 }
5535 }
5536
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005537 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5538 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5539 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005540 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
5541 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005542
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005543 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5544 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5545 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5546 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005547 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5548 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005549 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
5550 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005551 } else {
5552 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005553 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005554 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5555 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5556 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005557 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
5558 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005559 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005560 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005561 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005562 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005563 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5564 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5565 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005566 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
5567 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005568 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005569
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005570 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5571 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5572 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5573 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005574 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005575 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005576
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005577 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005578 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5579 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005580 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005581 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005582 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005583
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005584 // Look for diamond patterns.
5585 if (MergeCondStores)
5586 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5587 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5588 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5589 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
5590 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, AC) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005591
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005592 return false;
5593}
5594
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005595/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5596static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5597 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5598 if (!C)
5599 return false;
5600
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005601 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005602 return false;
5603
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005604 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005605 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005606 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005607
5608 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5609 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005610 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5611 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5612 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5613 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005614 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005615 return false;
5616
5617 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5618 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5619 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5620 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5621
5622 // Look through bitcasts.
5623 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5624 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5625
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005626 // Load from null is undefined.
5627 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005628 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5629 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005630
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005631 // Store to null is undefined.
5632 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005633 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005634 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5635 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005636
5637 // A call to null is undefined.
5638 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5639 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005640 }
5641 return false;
5642}
5643
5644/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005645/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005646static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5647 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5648 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5649 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5650 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5651 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5652 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5653 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5654 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5655 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5656 // destination from conditional branches.
5657 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5658 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5659 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005660 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5661 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005662 BI->eraseFromParent();
5663 return true;
5664 }
5665 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5666 }
5667
5668 return false;
5669}
5670
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005671bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005672 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005673
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005674 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005675 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005676
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005677 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5678 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005679 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005680 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005681 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5682 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5683 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005684 }
5685
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005686 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5687 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005688 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005689
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005690 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5691 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5692
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005693 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5694 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5695
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005696 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5697 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5698 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5699 //
5700 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5701 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005702
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005703 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5704
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005705 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5706 // eliminate it, do so now.
5707 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5708 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005709 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005710
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005711 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005712 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005713 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005714 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5715 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005716 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005717 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5718 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005719 }
5720 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005721 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5722 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005723 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005724 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5725 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005726 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005727 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5728 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5729 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005730 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005731 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5732 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005733 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005734 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5735 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5736 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005737 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005738 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5739 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5740 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005741 }
5742
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005743 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005744}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005745
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005746/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5747/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005748/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5749/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5750///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005751bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005752 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, AssumptionCache *AC,
5753 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005754 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005755 BonusInstThreshold, AC, LoopHeaders)
5756 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005757}